Mark 1:16 — Word Study

Greek	English	Parsing
Καὶ	And
παράγων	passing
δὲ	now	Conjunction
παρὰ	by	Preposition
τὴν	the	Article, accusative, singular
θάλασσαν	Sea	Noun, accusative, singular
τῆς	<the>	Article, genitive, singular
Γαλιλαίας	of Galilee	Noun, genitive, singular
εἶδεν	He saw	Verb, second aorist, active
Σίμωνα	Simon	Noun, accusative, singular
καὶ	and	Conjunction
Ἀνδρέαν	Andrew	Noun, accusative, singular
τὸν	the	Article, accusative, singular
ἀδελφὸν	brother	Noun, accusative, singular
αὐτοῦ	of him	Personal pronoun, genitive, singular
τοῦ	<the>	Article, genitive, singular
Σίμωνος	of Simon	Noun, genitive, singular
ἀμφιβάλλοντας	net-casting	Verb, present, active
ἀμφίβληστρον	a net	Noun, accusative, singular
ἐν	into	Preposition
τῇ	the	Article, dative, singular
θαλάσσῃ·	sea;	Noun, dative, singular
ἦσαν	they were	Verb, imperfect, active
γὰρ	for	Conjunction
ἁλιεῖς.	fishermen.	Noun, nominative, plural

	Reference	Text (BSB)
1	Matthew 4:18–22	As Jesus was walking beside the Sea of Galilee, He saw two brothers, Simon called Peter and his brother Andrew. They were casting a net into the sea, for they were fishermen.
2	Luke 5:1–4	On one occasion, while Jesus was standing by the Lake of Gennesaret with the crowd pressing in on Him to hear the word of God,
3	Mark 3:16–18	These are the twelve He appointed: Simon (whom He named Peter),
4	Matthew 10:2	These are the names of the twelve apostles: first Simon, called Peter, and his brother Andrew; James son of Zebedee, and his brother John;
5	Luke 6:14	Simon, whom He named Peter, and his brother Andrew; James and John; Philip and Bartholomew;

Word	Editions carrying it	Missing from
Καὶ And	NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg	TR, Byz
παράγων passing	NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg	TR, Byz
δὲ now	TR, Byz	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
αὐτοῦ of him	TR, Byz	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
τοῦ <the>	Byz	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR
Σίμωνος of Simon	NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, Byz	TR
ἀμφιβάλλοντας net-casting	NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg	TR, Byz
ἀμφίβληστρον a net	TR, Byz	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

Καὶ And G2532 ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίAnd8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

παράγων passing G3855 ¶

10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To pass by or go away from a place, as in Matthew 9:9 and Mark 1:16. This word means to lead near or go along. It is used to describe Jesus passing by and calling his disciples.

Tyndale gloss

to pass

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παράγω is built from the roots meaning 'beside' and 'to lead.' It covers a range of meanings including to lead past, depart, or pass away. In the New Testament, it is used in contexts such as passing by (Matthew 9:9, 27) and departing (John 8:59). Some lexicons note its use in a military context, while others emphasize its metaphorical applications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρ-άγω,

[in LXX chiefly for עבר;]

trans., to lead by, lead aside, lead into, lead forward, etc.

Intrans.,

to pass by: Mt 9:9, 27 20:30, Mk 2:14 15:21, Jo 8:59 R, txt., 9:1; seq. παρό, c. acc., Mk 1:16;

to go away, depart; metaph., to pass away: I Co 7:31; mid., I Jo 2:8, 17.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρ-άγω ; impf. παρῆγον (Jn. viii. 59 Rec.) ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. παράγεται; fr. [Archil., Theogn.], Pind. and Hdt. down; Sept. several times for 72» in Kal and Hiphil ; 1. trans. [(cf. mapa, IV-)]; a. to lead past, lead by. b. to lead aside, mislead; to lead away. c. to lead to; to lead forth, bring forward. 2. intrans. (see ἄγω, 4) ; a. to pass by, go past: Mt. xx. 30; Mk. ii. 14; xv. 21; [Lk. xviii. 39 L mrg.]; foll. by παρά w. an ace. of place, Mk. i. 16 L T Tr WH (by κατά w. acc. of place, 3 Mace. vi. 16; θεωροῦντες παράγουσαν τὴν δύναμιν, Polyb. 5, 18, 4). b. to depart, go away: Jn. viii. 59 Rec.; ix. 1; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. ix. 9, 27. ΓΑΙ. adhere to the meaning pass by in all these pass. ] Metaph. to pass away, disappear: 1 Co. vii. 31 (Ps. exliii. (exliv.) 5); in the passive in the same sense, 1 Jn. ii. Sele mapa-Seyparitw; 1 aor. inf. παραδειγματίσαι ; (παράδειγμα [(fr. δείκνυμι)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παράγω (paragō) — to pass.

παρ-άγω,

future παράξω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect παραγέωχα [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—lead by or past a place, with accusative loci, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάραγε πτέρυγας fly past, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a person, ἐν θριάμβῳ παράγεσθαι [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. in Tactics, march the men up from the side, bring them from column into line, π. τοὺς ἐπὶ κέρως πορευομένους.. εἰς μέτωπον [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. bring round or forward, ἀγκῶνα παρὰ τὸ στῆθος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; twist round or out of place, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

4. π. ὑπόχυμα couch a cataract, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

5. divert, ὑδραγωγόν [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παράγω

parago

from 3844 and 71; to lead near, i.e. (reflexively or intransitively)

to go along or away:--depart, pass (away, by, forth).

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 71

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παράγω

v.

I pass by, depart, pass away

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παράγω paragō 10x

to lead beside; intrans. to pass along or by, Mt. 20:30; Jn. 9:1; to pass on, Mt. 9:9, 27; intrans. and mid. to pass away, be in a state of transition, 1 Cor. 7:31; 1 Jn. 2:8, 17

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παράγω fut. -άξω aor2 παρήγαγον to lead by or past a place, c. acc. loci, Hdt.

as military term, to march the men up from the side, to bring them from column into line, Xen.

to lead aside from the way, mislead, Lat. seducere, Pind., attic: —Pass., φόβῳ παρηγόμην Soph.; ἀπάτῃ Thuc.

generally, to lead to or into a thing, ἔς τι Eur.; mostly of something bad, Theogn., etc.:—Pass. to be induced, c. inf., παρηγμένος εἰργάσθαι τι Soph.

of things, to lead aside, alter the course of a thing, Hdt., Plat.

to bring and set beside others, to bring forward, introduce, ἐς μέσον Hdt.; π. εἰς τὸ δικαστήριον to bring a matter before the court, Dem.:—also to bring forward as a witness, id. Dem.

to bring in, with a notion of secresy, Hdt.:—Pass. to come in stealthily, slip in, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

27%passing away

passing away27% · 3×passing on27% · 3×passing by27% · 3×passing9% · 1×he was passing by9% · 1×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb70%adverbial20%object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

ἸησοῦςJesus

ὅτιthat, since, bec

ἀγγαρεύωI impress, send

καίand, even, also,

καταχράομαιI use up

μήNeg

σκοτίαdarkness

ὁArticle the

παράγωpassing10×

what comes after →

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ΛευίPropἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesus

ἐκεῖθενthence, from that pl

ὁArticle the

κράζωI cry aloud, shriek

λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαράγω · 10× in the New Testament

Matthew Mark 1 John 1 Corinthians John

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἸησοῦςJesus×ἐκεῖθενthence, from that place×ὁράωI see, look upon, experience×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.64c. AD 40

ἡ μὲν γὰρ σοφίζεται καὶ παράγει τὸν νοῦν, οὐχ ὁποῖα τὰ ὑποκείμενά ἐστι δηλοῦσα, ἀλλ’ ὁποῖα οὐκ ἔστιν, ἡ δὲ αἴσθησις ἀκραιφνῶς δίδωσι τὰ σώματα οὕτως, ὡς ἔχει φύσεως ἐκεῖνα, πλάσματος καὶ τέχνης ἐκτός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 16.304c. AD 75–95

οὗτος Ἀλέξανδρον παράγει νέον ὄντα καὶ περὶ ὧν ἐπεπόνθει μηδενὶ μὲν πρὸς ἐκεῖνον δὲ μόνον ἀδεῶς πεπεισμένον ἐξεῖναι λέγειν·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Tebt. 1 161Kerkeosiris (Arsinoites)117 BC–116 BC

εἰς δὲ Μοῖριν τὴν σύνεγγυς φρουρουμένην στάδια ρνθ, ὁ δʼ ἐξ αὐτῆς συναγόμενος σῖτος παράγεται εἰς τὸν ἐν τῇ κώμῃ βασιλικὸν θησαυρόν, μετρουμένων εἰς τὰς καθάρσεις καὶ τὸ κοσκινευτικὸν

P.Tebt. 1 92Kerkeosiris (Arsinoites)114 BC

ρξ εἰς δὲ Μοῖριν τὴνσύνενγυς φρουρουμένην στάδια ρνθ ὁ δʼ ἐξ αὐτῆς συναγόμενος σῖτος παράγεται εἰς τὸν ἐν τῇ κώμῃ βασιλικὸν θησαυρόν, προσμετρουμένων εἰς τὰς καθάρσεις καὶ τὸ κοσκινευτικὸν

Stud.Pal. 5 27Hermopolis (HermopolitesAD 253–AD 268

Column i … ει μέλλων παραγω… εν λέγω παρὰ γὰρ τῷ … συγχώρησόν μοι … η τοῦ Ἑριέως … γαρ

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

δὲde now G1161 Conjunction ¶

2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.

Tyndale gloss

then

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

33%now

now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand

εἰCond

παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist

εἰμίI am, exist

περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche

οὗτος

δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t

δέnow2787×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

αὐτός

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn

τὶς

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

παρὰpara by G3844 Preposition ¶

192× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Means 'from' or 'beside', indicating the source or origin of something, as seen in Mark 14:43 and John 15:26. It can also mean 'at' or 'in the vicinity of' something. Used to show the relationship between people or things.

Amplified meaning

by, near, alongside

Tyndale gloss

from/with/beside

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παρά is a preposition that conveys the idea of proximity, meaning 'beside' or 'from the side of.' It can take the genitive, dative, or accusative case, indicating source, location, or motion towards something. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts involving relationships, such as 'his family' (Mk 3:21) or 'from God' (Jn 9:16). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρά, prep. c. gen., dat., acc.,

with radical sense, beside.

C. gen. pers., from the side of, from beside, from, indicating source or origin, [in LXX for מֵאֵצֶל, מִיַד, מִלִּפְנֵי;] after verbs of motion, Mk 14:43, Lk 8:49, Jo 15:26, al.; after verbs of seeking, receiving, hearing, etc., Mk 8:11 12:2, Jo 4:9, 52 10:18, Phl 4:18, II Ti 1:18, Ja 1:7, al.; after passive verbs, of the agent (like ὑπό), Mt 21:42, Mk 12:11, Lk 1:37; absol., οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ, his family, his kinsfolk, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρά, [it neglects elision before prop. names beginning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.’s text) before some other words; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95, cf. W. § 5, 1 a.; B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity, with various modifications corresponding to the various cases with which it is joined; ef. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 643 sqq.; Matthiae § 588; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq.; Ktihner § 440; Kriiger § 68, 34-36. It is joined I. with the GenitIvE; and as in Grk. prose writ. always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or from one’s sphere of power, or from one’s wealth or store, Lat. a, ab; Germ.von ... her, von neben; French de chez; [Eng. from beside, from]; Sept. for *339D, 7°, Syxn (1S. xvii. 30); cf. W. 364 (342) sq- a. properly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence, after verbs of coming, departing, setting out…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παρά is found in the NT c. gen. (78 times), c. dat. (50 times), and c. acc. (60 times): see Proleg. p. 106. All these constructions can be freely illustrated from our sources. (1) c. gen. indicating source or origin ‘‘ from the side of,” “*from,’’ used of persons after verbs of receiving etc.: Ostr 10278 (Ptol.) (= LAZ, p. 152) ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (cf. Lk 1515) μοι ἐκφόριον, “1 have received from you the fruit that falleth to me,” P Petr 11. τι (1)° (mid. iii/B.c.) = Witkowski’, p. 8) γίνωσκε δέ pe ἔχοντα παρὰ Φιλωνίδου (δραχμὰς) o, P Eleph 13? (B.C. 223-2) (= Witkowski’, p. 42) παραγενομένου Lav@tos ἐκομισάμην τὴν παρὰ cov ἐπιστολήν, P Tebt II. 28322 (B.c. 93 or 60) τούτου δὲ γενομ[έϊνου ἔσομαι τετευχὼς [TH]s Tapa cod ἀντιλήμψεως, ‘* for if this is done I shall have obtained succour from you” (Edd.), P Oxy IV. 742? (B.c. 2) παράλαβε παρὰ Πόθου τὸν κάλαμ[ο]ν πανα[ρ]ιθμῶι, ‘take…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παρά (para) — from/with/beside.

πᾰρά [ρᾰ],

Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also παραί: shortened πάρ, in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Lyric poetry (but rarely in Trag., in Lyric poetry passages, [Refs 5th c.BC+], and in all dial ects except Attic dialect, [Refs 4th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative, properly beside: hence,

__A WITH GEN. properly denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:

__A.I of Place, πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πλευρὰ παρ᾽ ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield,[Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.II commonly of Persons,

__A.II.1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc., ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, [NT+5th c.BC+]; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ᾽ Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παρά

para

a primary preposition; properly, near; i.e. (with genitive case) from

beside (literally or figuratively), (with dative case) at (or in) the

vicinity of (objectively or subjectively), (with accusative case) to

the proximity with (local (especially beyond or opposed to) or causal

(on account of):--above, against, among, at, before, by, contrary to,

X friend, from, + give (such things as they), + that (she) had,

X his, in, more than, nigh unto, (out) of, past, save,

side...by, in the sight of, than, (there-)fore, with. In compounds it

retains the same variety of application.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παρά

Prep.

from, in the presence of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παρά para 194x

(1) gen., from, indicating source or origin, Mt. 2:4, 7; Mk. 8:11; Lk. 2:1; οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ, his relatives or kinsmen, Mk. 3:21; τὰ παρ’ αὐτῆς πάντα, all her substance, property, etc., Mk. 5:26. (2) dat., with, in, among, etc., Mt. 6:1; 19:26; 21:25; 22:25; παρ’ ἑαυτῷ, at home, 1 Cor. 16:2; in the sight of, in the judgment or estimation of, 1 Cor. 3:19; 2 Pet. 2:11; 3:8. (3) acc., motion, by, near…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παρά from the side of, c. gen., beside, alongside of, c. dat., to the side of, motion alongside of, c. acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radical sense beside:

WITH GENIT. from the side of, from beside: from, φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος παρὰ μηροῦ Il.

commonly of Persons, ἦλθε πὰρ Διός id. Il.; ἀγγελίη ἥκει παρὰ βασιλῆος Hdt.; ὁ παρά τινος ἥκων his messenger, Xen.

issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι παρά τινος to be born from him, Plat.; when it follows a Noun, a particip. may be supplied, ἡ παρὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων δόξα glory from (given by) men, id. Plat.; τὸ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Xen.; παρ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ διδόναι to give from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

By

In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

36%from

from36% · 71×with21% · 40×by7% · 13×at5% · 9×beside5% · 9×contrary to3% · 6×beyond3% · 6×than3% · 6×other renderings18% · 35×

195 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial84%predicate7%object5%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

εἰμίI am, existἀκούωI hear, listenδαπανάωI spend, bear ex

αὐτός

ῥίπτωI throw, cast, tγίνομαιI come into beinλέγωI say, speak

εἰμίI am, exist

ἀδύνατοςincapable, imposκαίand, even, also,ἸουδαῖοςJewish

ἀκούωI hear, listen

ὅςὁArticle the

τὶς

βραχύςshort, littleἔρχομαιI come, goπροσδοκάωI expect, await

παράby192×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, ὁδόςa way, road, jou

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oποῦIrg

σύ

μένωI remain, abideεἰμίI am, existἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o

ἐγώ

ὁArticle theἑπτάIndecπίνωI drink, imbibe

θεόςGod, a god

πατήρfather, Father, πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαρά · 192× in the New Testament

John Acts Luke Matthew Mark Romans Hebrews 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Galatians James 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πατήρfather, Father, ancestor×λαμβάνωI receive, take×μένωI remain, abide×θάλασσαthe sea, lake×ὁδόςa way, road, journey×πούςthe foot×δόξαhonor, renown, glory splendor×πίπτωI fall, fall under×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.5c. AD 100

ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Νεχούτης Σχώτου τοῦ Φιμήνιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν νε

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Μεσορὴ ε ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ὠνή. ἀπέδοτο Πανοβχοῦνις Παοῦτος Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

τὴνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

θάλασσανthalassa Sea G2281 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

91× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for sea, used in the Bible to describe large bodies of water like the Mediterranean or Red Sea, as seen in Acts 10:6 and 1 Corinthians 10:1-2.

Amplified meaning

large body of water

Tyndale gloss

sea

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θάλασσα (thalassa) means 'the sea' and is often used in the New Testament to refer to various bodies of water, including the Mediterranean and the Red Sea. It can also denote an inland lake, such as the Sea of Galilee. The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 23:15 and Acts 7:36. Some sources note its connection to the idea of agitation, but interpretations vary.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — θάλασσα, πέλαγος from a scan

THE connexion of θάλασσα with the verb ταράσσειν, that it means properly the agitated or disturbed, finds favour with 1 I cannot regard as an evidence of such reconsecration the wellknown words of Ignatius, Ad Rom. 7: ὃ ἐμὸς ἔρως ἐσταύρωται. It is far more consistent with the genius of these Ignatian Epistles to take épws subjectively here, ‘ My love of the world is crucified,’ .6. with Christ ; rather than objectively, ‘ Christ, the object of my love, is crucified.’ 2 Consult on ἔρως the noble fragment from Sophocles, preserved by Stobeeus : Νόσημ᾽ ἔρωτος τοῦτ᾽ ἐφίμερον κακόν. ἔχοιμ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸ μὴ κακῶς ἀπεικάσαι, ὅταν πάγου φανέντος αἰθρίου χεροῖν κρύσταλλον ἁρπάσωσι παῖδες ἀσταγῆ. τὰ πρῶτ᾽ ἔχουσιν ἡδονὰς ποταινίους, τέλος δ᾽ ὃ χυμὸς οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἀφῇ θέλει οὔτ᾽ ἐν χεροῖν τὸ κτῆμα σύμφορον μένειν. οὕτω γε τοὺς ἐρῶντας αὑτὸς ἵμερος δρᾶν καὶ τὸ μὴ δρᾶν πολλάκις προΐεται. §xul1 SYNONYMS OF THE…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θάλασσα, -ης, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for יָם;]

the sea: Mt 23:15, Mk 11:23, Lk 21:25, Ro 9:27, He 11:12, Ja 1:6, Ju 13, Re 7:1, al.; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θ. (v. Tr., ut infr.), Mt 18:6; ὁ οὐρανὸς κ. ἡ γῆ κ. ἡ θ., of the whole world, Ac 4:24, al. (Hg 2:7); θ. ὑαλίνη, Re 4:6 15:2; of the Mediterranean, Ac…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θάλασσα [cf. B. 7], -ns, 7, (akin to ads [better, allied to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing; ef. Vanitek, p. 303]; Sept. for D>), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinetion from πέλαγος see the latter word]; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2,6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix. 27; 2Co. xi. 26; Heb. xi. 12;,Jas.i.6; Jude 13; Rev. Vil. 1-3, ete.; ἐργάζεσθαι τὴν θάλ. (see ἐργάζομαι, 2 a.), Rey. xviii. 17; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς Bad. (see πέλαγος, a.), Mt. xviii. 6; joined with γῆ and οὐρανός it forms a periphrasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v. 13; x. 6 [L WHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hage. ii. 7; Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2,10,1]); among the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used [even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); Β. § 124, 8b.] of…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θάλασσα. BGU II. 4237 (ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 90) εὐχαριστῶ | | from Cnidus, Sy// 8152, where a woman devotes to Demeter (cf. 2 Cor 1178) ἔσωσε, P Oxy VII. 1067*9 (iii/A.D.) ἀγόρασόν ᾿ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι, ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν μοι ὀψαρίδιον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης (cf. Jn 2119), and from the inserr. Michel 372" (ii/B.c.) ἐργα[ζ]όμενός τε κατὰ θάλασσαν ἐργασίαν, 7. 52119 (ii/B.c.) κατὰ γῆς καὶ κατὰ θαλάσσας. For references to ἣ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα, as in Ac γ35, Heb 117%, cf. P Grenf I. 9% (iii/B.c.) ἐρ]υθρᾶι θαλάσσηι, OG/S 186° (B.C. 62) ὁ συγγενὴς καὶ ἐπιστράτηγος Kal στρατηγὸς τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης, 16. 190" (B.c. 51) ἐπὶ τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης : cf. also the intr. to P Ryl 11. 66 (late ii/p.c.). For the adj. θαλάττί--σσ-)ιος, see P Oxy I. 877 (A.D. 342) θαλαττίου ναυκληρίου, ‘a seagoing vessel,” 26. X. 1288® (iv/a.D.) eis διαγραφὴν πλύου θαλασσίας…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θάλασσα (thalassa) — sea.

θάλασσα [θᾰ],

Attic dialectθᾰλᾰμ-ττα [Refs] (but θάλασσα 22.236 [Refs 4th c.BC+], ἡ: —sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently of the Mediterranean sea, ἥδε ἡ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐντὸς καὶ κ. ἡ. λεγομένη θ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἡ ἔσω θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἡ ἔξω θ., of the Ocean, [Refs]; ἡ Ἀτλαντικὴ θ. [Refs]; ἡ μεγάλη θ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]; of a salt lake, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opposed to πεζῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to κατὰ γῆς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατά τε γῆν καὶ κατὰ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς θ. ἀνθεκτέα ἐστί one must engage in maritime affairs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ περὶ τὴν θ. sea-faring men, [Refs 4th c.BC+] a sea of troubles, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ Κρὴς τὴν θ. (i.e. ἀγνοεῖ), of pretended ignorance…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θάλασσα

thalassa

probably prolonged from 251; the sea (genitive case or

specially):--sea.

see GREEK for 251

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θάλασσα, ης, ἡ

n.f.

the sea, lake

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θάλασσα thalassa 91x

the sea, Mt. 23:15, Mk. 9:42; a sea, Acts 7:36; an inland sea, lake, Mt. 8:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θάλασσα the sea, Hom., etc.; when he uses it of a particular sea, he means the Mediterranean, opp. to Ὠκεανός; — Hdt. calls the Mediterranean ἥδε ἡ θάλασσα; so, ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θάλ. Plat.; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opp. to πεζῇ by land, Hdt.; to κατὰ γῆς, Thuc.:—metaph., κακῶν θ. a sea of troubles, Aesch.

a well of salt water, said to be produced by a stroke of Poseidon's trident, in the Acropolis at Athens, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

se (yam; thalassa; in Ac 27:5 pelagos): The Mediterranean is called ha-yam ha-gadhol, "the great sea" (Nu 34:6; Jos 1:4; Eze 47:10, etc.); ha-yam ha-'acharon, "the hinder," or "western sea" (De 11:24; 34:2; Joe 2:20; Zec 14:8); yam pelishtim, "the sea of the Philis" (Ex 23:31); the King James Version translates yam yapho' in Ezr 3:7 by "sea of Joppa," perhaps rightly.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The sea, yam , is used in Scripture to denote-- "The gathering of the waters," "the Ocean." (Genesis 1:2,10; 30:13) etc. Some portion of this, as the Mediterranean Sea, called the "hinder," the "western" and the "utmost" sea, (11:24; 34:2; Joel 2:20) "sea of the Philistines," (Exodus 23:31) "the great sea," (Numbers 36:6,7; Joshua 15:47) "the sea." Genesis49:13; Psal 80:11 Also frequently of the Red Sea. (Exodus 15:4) [RED SEA SEA] Inland lakes termed seas, as the Salt or Dead Sea. [See the special article] Any…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The Hebrews give the name of sea to any large collection of water, Job 14:11; as to the lakes of Tiberias and Asphaltites, and also to the rivers Nile and Euphrates, Isa 11:15 18:2 21:1 Jer 51:36,42. The principal seas mentioned in Scripture are the following:

1. The GREAT SEA, the Mediterranean, called also the Hinder or Western Sea. Indeed, the Hebrew word for sea, meaning the Mediterranean, is often put for the west. The Great Sea is 2,200 miles long, and in the widest part 1,200 miles in width. In many places it is so deep as to give no soundings. It is little affected by tides, but is often agitated by violent winds. The prevailing direction of the wind in spring is from the southeast and southwest and from the northeast…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Creation of Ge 1:9,10; Ps 95:5; 148:4,5

→ Lake Galilee calmed by Jesus Mt 8:24-26; Mr 4:37-39

→ Jesus walked upon Lake Galilee Mt 14:25-31

→ The Dead, to be given up by the, at the resurrection Re 20:13

→ SYMBOLICAL

In Daniel' s vision Da 7:2,3

In John' s apocalyptic vision Re 4:6; 8:8,9; 10:2,5,6,8; 13:1; 15:2; 16:3; 21:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

99%sea

sea99% · 89×other renderings1% · 1×

90 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial69%subject12%object10%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 91 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

εἰςἐπίἐν

ἐρυθρόςred

ἐνὁArticle the

παρά

οἰκίαa house, househoβυρσεύςa tanner

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

θρόνοςa throne, seatὁράωI see, look upon

ὁδόςa way, road, journey

ΝεφθαλίμProp

θάλασσαSea91×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

πᾶςall, the whole, γίνομαιI come into beinὁArticle the

ὁArticle the

ΓαλιλαίαGalileeΤιβεριάςTiberiasδίκηjustice, judicia

εἰμίI am, exist

γάρforκαίand, even, also,

περιπατέωI walk, conduct my l

ταράσσωI agitate, stir δοκέωI think, seem, a

εἰς

ὁArticle theΚαφαρναούμProp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθάλασσα · 91× in the New Testament

Revelation Mark Matthew Acts John Luke 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians James Jude Romans

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπί×παρά×γῆthe earth, soil, land×βάλλωI cast, throw, rush, put, place, drop×πέρανover, beyond×ΓαλιλαίαGalilee×περιπατέωI walk, conduct my life×ἄνεμοςthe wind×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יָםsea84%H3220 · 189 verses

Counted over the 224 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 84c. AD 40

οὐ γὰρ ἀναπτῆναι, φησίν, εἰς οὐρανὸν οὐδὲ πέραν θαλάσσης ἀφικέσθαι δεῖ κατὰ ζήτησιν τοῦ καλοῦ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.31c. AD 75–95

τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἵστησι τὴν γῆν ἀναχέας περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν θάλασσαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.5c. AD 100

ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD

O.Berenike 2 124 RoBerenikeAD 50–AD 75

σηδυω … … … αμβα. … … ηρου … ε … ω θαλασσα … α … … … ἠλλαχέναι σοι

749339Myos HormosAD 93

ἐν Μυὸς Ὅρμωι τῶι πρὸς τῇ ἐρυθρᾷ θαλάσσῃ ἔτους δωδεκάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Φαμενὼθ ἐνάτῃ καὶ εἰκάδι Ἀμμώνιος Εὐδαίμονος Πέρσης

BGU 2 423Misenum? (Italien)AD 101–AD 200

θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς καὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ μου. εὐχαριστῶ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν ἔσωσε εὐθέως. ὅτε εἰσῆλθον εἰς Μησήνους, ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς καὶ καλῶς

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

τῆςho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ΓαλιλαίαςGalilaia of Galilee G1056 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

61× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Galilee is a region in Palestine where Jesus ministered, as seen in Matthew 4:15 and John 6:1. It was also the location of the Sea of Galilee, a significant setting for Jesus' teachings and miracles.

Amplified meaning

a region in Palestine

Tyndale gloss

(Sea of) Galilee

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The word Γαλιλαία (i.e., *Galilaia*) refers to Galilee, a northern region of Palestine during New Testament times. It is derived from Hebrew, meaning 'the circle' or 'district.' The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 4:15 and Matthew 15:29, where it is associated with both the region and the Sea of Galilee.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district),

Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt 4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mt 15:29 (cf. Jo 6:1).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Γαλιλαία (Galilaia) — Galilee.

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district),

Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mat.4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mat.15:29 (cf. Jhn.6:1).

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Γαλιλαία (Galilaia) — (Sea of) Galilee.

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district),

Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mat.4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mat.15:29 (cf.

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Γαλιλαία

Galilaia

of Hebrew origin (1551); Galiloea (i.e. the heathen circle), a region

of Palestine:--Galilee.

see HEBREW for 01551

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Γαλιλαία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

Galilee

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Γαλιλαία Galilaia 61x

Galilee, a district of Palestine north of Samaria, Mt. 4:15

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

gal'-i-le (ha-galil, hagelilah, literally, "the circuit" or "district"; he Galilaia):

1. Galilee of the Nations:

Kedesh, the city of refuge, is described as lying in Galilee, in Mt. Naphtali (Jos 20:7; compare Jos 21:32). The name seems originally to have referred to the territory of Naphtali. Joshua's victorious campaign in the north (Jos 11), and, subsequently, the triumph of the northern tribes under Deborah and Barak (Jud 4 f) gave Israel supremacy; yet the tribe of Naphtali was not able to drive out all the former inhabitants of the land (Jud 1:33). In the time of Solomon the name applied to a much wider region, including the territory of Asher. In this land lay the cities given by Solomon to Hiram (

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Galilee

Circuit. Solomon rewarded Hiram for certain services rendered him by the gift of an upland plain among the mountains of Naphtali. Hiram was dissatisfied with the gift, and called it “the land of Cabul” (q.v.). The Jews called it Galil. It continued long to be occupied by the original inhabitants, and hence came to be called “Galilee of the Gentiles” (Matt. 4:15), and also “Upper Galilee,” to distinguish it from the extensive addition afterwards made to it toward the south, which was usually called “Lower Galilee.” In the time of our Lord, Galilee embraced more than one-third of Western Palestine, extending “from Dan on the north, at the base of Mount Hermon, to the ridges of Carmel and Gilboa on the south, and from the Jordan valley on the east away across the splendid plains of Jezreel and Acre to the shores of the…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(circuit). This name, which in the Roman age was applied to a large province, seems to have been originally confined to a little "circuit" of country round Kedesh-Naphtali, in which were situated the twenty towns given by Solomon to Hiram king of Tyre as payment for his work in conveying timber from Lebanon to Jerusalem. (Joshua 20:7; 1 Kings 9:11) In the time of our Lord all Palestine was divided into three provinces, Judea, Samaria and Galilee. (Luke 17:11; Acts 9:31) Joseph. B.J. iii. 3. The latter included the whole northern section of the country, including the ancient territories of Issachar, Zebulun, Asher and Naphtali. On the west it was bounded by the territory of…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In the time of Christ, included all the northern part of Palestine lying west of the Jordan and north of Samaria. Before the exile the name seems to have been applied only to a small tract bordering on the northern limits, 1Ki 9:11. Galilee, in the time of Christ, was divided into Upper and Lower, the former lying north of the territory of the tribe of Zebulun, and abounding in mountains; the latter being more level and fertile, and very populous; the whole comprehending the four tribes of Issachar, Zebulun, Naphtali, and Asher. Lower Galilee is aid to have contained four hundred and four towns and villages, of which Josephus mentions Tiberias, Sepphoris, and Gabara, as the principal; though Capernaum and Nazareth are the most frequently mentioned in the New Testament, Mr 1:9

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%galilee

galilee100% · 62×

62 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial85%predicate8%subject5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 61 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

εἰςἀπόθάλασσαthe sea, lake

καίand, even, also, nam

ΣαμάρειαSamariaἸουδαίαJudea

Ἰορδάνηςthe Jordan

ὁArticle the

Γαλιλαίαof Galilee61×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existΔεκάπολιςDecapolis

ὁArticle the

ἔθνοςa race, people, ΤιβεριάςTiberiasΧριστόςanointed, the Me

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

δύοΣίμωνSimonοὗτος

εἰς

ὁArticle theπόλιςa cityἹεροσόλυμαProp

ἐκεῖthere, yonder, thith

αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΓαλιλαία · 61× in the New Testament

John Matthew Luke Mark Acts

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἰς×ἀπό×θάλασσαthe sea, lake×ΝαζαράProp×πόλιςa city×ἸουδαίαJudea×ΚανάProp×Ἰορδάνηςthe Jordan×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Embassy to Gaius 326c. AD 40

τὸν μέγιστον καὶ εὐτυχέστατον ἐν ἀνθρώποις κλῆρον ἐχαρίσω μοι, βασιλείαν, πάλαι μὲν μιᾶς χώρας, αὖθις δὲ καὶ ἑτέρας μείζονος, τὴν Τραχωνῖτιν λεγομένην καὶ τὴν Γαλιλαίαν συνάψας·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.63c. AD 75–95

τοῦ δὲ περὶ τῆς τῶν Ἑβραίων ἀρετῆς λόγου πολλοῦ φοιτῶντος εἰς τοὺς περιοίκους κατάπληξις εἶχε τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸ τῶν ἀπολωλότων πλῆθος καὶ στρατεύουσιν ἐπʼ αὐτοὺς οἱ περὶ Λίβανον ὄρος βασιλεῖς ὄντες Χαναναῖοι καὶ οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις τῶν Χαναναίων…

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

εἶδενhoraō He saw G1492 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular ¶

320× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This verb means to see or perceive, used in the Bible to describe spiritual awareness or insight. In Matthew 25:13 and John 10:4, it refers to recognizing God's presence or will. The verb is often used to encourage believers to seek spiritual understanding and discernment.

Tyndale gloss

to perceive: see

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οἶδα (i.e., *oida*) is derived from the root of εἶδον (i.e., *eidon*), meaning 'to see' or 'to perceive.' It primarily conveys the idea of knowing or having knowledge, often used in contexts where one has seen or understood something. The New Testament employs it in various constructions, indicating knowledge of things, people, or concepts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οἶδα, (from same root as εἶδον, q.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for ידע;]

pf. with pres. meaning (plpf. as impf.; on irregular tense-forms, v. App.),

to have seen or perceived, hence, to know, have knowledge of: c. acc. rei, Mt 25:13, Mk 10:19, Jo 10:4, Ro 7:7, al.; c. acc. pers., Mt 26:72, Jo 1:31, Ac 3:16, al.; τ. θεόν, I Th 4:5, Tit 1:16, al.; c. acc. et inf., Lk 4:41, al.; seq. ὅτι, Mt 9:6,

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οἶδα καὶ τὰς προστιμή[σεις τῶν] ὀθονίων ἕως τοῦ ν (ἔτους), ““ἀπᾷ they remit to the overseers of the temples and the chief priests and priests the arrears on account of both the tax for overseers and the values of woven cloths up to the soth year”’ (Edd.): see the editors’ note ad 7. and P Rey L}xxxvii-cvii with the note on p. 175, also OG/ZS go! (Rosetta stone— B.C. 196) τῶν τ᾽ εἰς TO βασιλικὸν συντελουμένων ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς βυσσίνων ὀθονίων ἀπέλυσεν τὰ δύο μέρη, {0.25 τὰς τιμὰς τῶν μὴ συντετελεσμένων εἰς τὸ βασιλικὸν βυσσίνων ὀθ[ονίων. On the manufacture of ὀθόνιον (Suid. λεπτὸν ὕφασμα) see Otto Préester i. p. 300f., and cf. the Zeno letter PSI VI. 599 (iii/B.c.), where mention is made of 3 slaves and 1 woman as engaged on the manufacture of each ὀθόνιον. The word ὀθονιοπώλης,, ‘“a linen-seller,”’ is restored by Wilcken in P Leid 13 (B.c. 99) (=I. p. 52); for ὀθονιακός, ‘a…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἴδω (eidō) — to perceive: understand.

εἴδω,

no active present in use, ὁράω being used:—middle, see.below [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist 2 εἶδον always in sense of see (so in present and aorist 1 middle, to be seen, i.e. seem): but perfect οἶδα, in present sense, know. (With ἔ-ϝιδον, compare (ϝ) είδομαι, (ϝ) εῖδος, Latin videre; with (ϝ) οῖδα, cf. Sanskrit véda, Gothic wait, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] wát 'know'.)

__A aorist 2 εἶδον (late εἶδα [Refs 5th c.AD+]aorist to ὁράω, Epic dialect ἴδον, iterative ἴδεσκε [Refs 8th c.BC+], late Aeolic dialect εὔιδον [Refs]; imperative ἴδε (in Attic dialect written as adverb ἰδέ, behold! Hdn.Gr.2.23), ἴδετ; subjunctive ἴδω, Epic dialect ἴδωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative ἴδοιμ; infinitive ἰδεῖν, Epic dialect ἰδέει; participle ἰδών: hence, future ἰδησῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+] —middle, aorist 2 εἰδόμην, Epic dialect…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

οἶδα οιδα ὁράω

eido

a primary verb; used only in certain past tenses, the others being

borrowed from the equivalent 3700 and 3708; properly, to see

(literally or figuratively); by implication, (in the perfect tense

only) to know:--be aware, behold, X can (+ not tell), consider, (have)

know(-ledge), look (on), perceive, see, be sure, tell, understand,

wish, wot. Compare 3700.

see GREEK for 3700

see GREEK for 3708

see GREEK for 3700

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οἶδα

v.

I know, remember

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

so.

See TOOLS.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

Egyptian saws, so far as has yet been discovered, are single-handed. As is the case in modern Oriental saws, the teeth usually incline toward the handle, instead of away from it like ours. They have, in most cases, bronze blades, apparently attached to the handles by leathern thongs. No evidence exists of the use of the saw applied to stone in Egypt, but we read of sawn stones used in the temple. (1 Kings 7:9) The saws "under" or "in" which David is said to have placed his captives were of iron. The expression in (2 Samuel 12:31) does not necessarily imply torture, but the word "cut" in (1 Chronicles 20:3) can hardly be understood otherwise.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Used as an instrument of torture 2Sa 12:31; Heb 11:37

→ Used for cutting stone 1Ki 7:9

→ FIGURATIVE Isa 10:15

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

28%having seen

having seen28% · 105×i saw12% · 45×see9% · 33×he saw7% · 26×saw5% · 19×they saw3% · 13×knew3% · 12×do see3% · 10×other renderings31% · 118×

381 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 50 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 320 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

σύὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,

καίand, even, also, nam

ἀκούωI hear, listenἐγώοἶδαI know, remember

ἐγώ

ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,ὅςοὔτεNeg

μήNeg

πλανάωI lead astray, dὁArticle theἨλίαςElijah

σύ

κύριοςlord, Lord, mastφοβέωI fear, am terriπᾶςall, the whole,

οἶδαHe saw320×

what comes after →

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theἀληθήςunconcealed, truπᾶςall, the whole,

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusγραφήa writing, passaἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

γάρfor

ὅτιthat, since, becὁArticle theπότεIrg

τίςIrg

αἰτέωI ask, request, ἀποκρίνομαιI answer, replyποιέωI do, make

αὐτός

ὁArticle theἀλλάbut, exceptκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοἶδα · 320× in the New Testament

John 1 Corinthians Matthew Luke Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Romans 1 John 1 Thessalonians Revelation Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ὅτιthat, since, because×οὐNeg×πόθενIrg×νῦνnow, already, at present×πῶς×ἀληθήςunconcealed, true×ὑπάγωI go away, depart×ποῦIrg×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

רָאָהsee63%H7200 · 38 verses

Counted over the 60 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 41c. AD 40

τίς γὰρ οὐκ οἶδεν ὅτι πρῶτον μέν ἐστι σπορὰ καὶ φυτεία, δεύτερον δὲ τῶν σπαρέντων καὶ φυτευθέντων αὔξησις, ἡ μὲν εἰς τὸ κάτω ῥίζας ἀποτείνουσα οἱονεὶ θεμελίους, ἡ δ’ εἰς τὸ ἄνω πρὸς ὕψος αἰρομένων καὶ στελεχουμένων;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.285c. AD 75–95

Προϊὼν δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς Μεσοποταμίας χρόνῳ παρῆν εἰς τὴν Χαρράν, καὶ ποιμένας ἐν τοῖς προαστείοις καταλαβὼν καὶ παῖδας ἐφήβους καὶ παρθένους ὑπέρ τινος ἱδρυμένους φρέατος συνδιέτριβεν αὐτοῖς χρῄζων ποτοῦ εἴς τε λόγους αὐτοῖς ἀφικνούμενος ἀνέκρινεν αὐτούς,…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.9c. AD 100

οἶδεν ὁ τὴν ἔμφυτον δωρεὰν τῆς διδαχῆς αὐτοῦ θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 2 17Thebais137 BC

Πόρτιτος τῶν προκειμένων πάντων. ἔγραψεν Δρύτων Παμφίλου ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν διὰ τὸ φάσκειν αὐτοὺς μὴ εἰδέναι γράμματα. ἔτους λδ Τῦβι θ.

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

δίκης. ἔγραψεν ὑπὲρ τοῦ Ψεμμίνιος Διονύσιος Ἀρχεδήμου Βερενικεὺς ἀξιωθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ διὰ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι γράμματα. ἔτους η Τῦβι κδ.

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς Θηβαίδος. ὅπως οὖν εἰδότες εὐθαρσεῖς ὑπάρχητε ἐκρίναμεν σημῆναι. ἔρρωσθε ἔτους λ Φαῶφι ιθ

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ΣίμωναSimōn Simon G4613 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Simon is a Greek name used in the Bible for several Israelites, including Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot. It appears in Matthew, Mark, Luke, and Acts. Simon was also the name of one of Jesus' brothers and the father of Judas Iscariot.

Amplified meaning

a Greek name, meaning 'hearing'

Tyndale gloss

Simon

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Σίμων (i.e., *Simos*) is a name used for several figures in the New Testament, including Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot. It is derived from Hebrew and commonly appears in various contexts, such as Simon of Cyrene and Simon the Pharisee. The lexicons note that it can also refer to a proverbial expression for a confederate in evil and a name related to a throw of dice.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Σίμων, -ωνος, ὁ

a Greek name (transliterated סִימוֺן in Heb.) used as a substitute for Συμεών (q.v.), Simon

Simon Peter: Mt 17:25, Mk 1:29, al.

Simon the Zealot (v.s. ζηλωτής, Καναναῖος): Mt 10:4, Mk 3:18, Lk 6:15, Ac 1:13.

One of the Brethren of our Lord (v.s. ἀδελψός): Mt 13:55, Mk 6:3.

The father of Judas Iscariot, himself surnamed Ἰσκαριώτης (q.v.): Jo 6:71 12:4 (Rec.) 13:2, 26

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Σίμων, -wvos [B. 16 (14)], 6, (jipnw, ‘a hearing’, fr. ynw ‘to hear’; [there was also a Grk. name Σίμων (allied w. σιμός, i.e. ‘flat-nosed’; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p. 210), but cf. B. D.s. v. Simon init.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p- 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt. xvii. 25; Mk. i. 29sq. 36; Lk. iv. 38; v. 4sq. 10, ete.; see Πέτρος. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbzus [cf. s.V. Ἰούδας, 8], an apostle, who is called Kavavirns [so RG, but 1, T Tr WH -vaios, q.v.], Mt. x. 4; Mk. iii. 18, and ζηλωτής, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of Jesus [cf. s. v. ἀδελφός, 1]: Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3. 4. a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed Ἰσκαριὦτης (see Ἰούδας, 6) ]: Jn. vi. 71; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6. a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 48 54.. who appears to [some, e. g. Grotius…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Σίμων, a Greek name used as a substitute for Συμεών (7.v.) owing to similarity of sound (cf. Deissmann 8S, p. 315). The name is common in the papyri and need not necessarily refer to Jews, cf. P Lille I. 53°(B.c. 260-259), P Fay 14! (B.c. 124), P Tebt I. 4315 (B.c. 118), BGU IV. 11293 (B.c. 13), P Lond 1177729 (a.p. 113) (= III. p. 187), and BGU III. 9137 (A.D. 206).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

∑ίμων

Simon

of Hebrew origin (8095); Simon (i.e. Shimon), the name of nine

Israelites:--Simon. Compare 4826.

see GREEK for 4826

see HEBREW for 08095

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Σίμων, ωνος, ὁ

n.m.

Simon

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Σίμων Simōn 75x

Simon, pr. name. (1) Simon Peter, Mt. 4:18. (2) Simon (the Canaanite) the Zealot, Mt. 10:4; Acts 1:13 . (3) Simon, brother of Jesus, Mt. 13:55; Mk. 6:3. (4) Simon, the leper, Mt. 26:6; Mk. 14:3. (5) Simon, the Pharisee, Lk. 7:40. (6) Simon of Cyrene, Mt. 27:32. (7) Simon, father of Judas Iscariot, Jn. 6:71. (8) Simon, the sorcerer, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Simon

The abbreviated form of Simeon. (1.) One of the twelve apostles, called the Canaanite (Matt. 10:4; Mark 3:18). This word “Canaanite” does not mean a native of Canaan, but is derived from the Syriac word Kanean or Kaneniah, which was the name of a Jewish sect. The Revised Version has “Cananaean;” marg., “or Zealot” He is also called “Zelotes” (Luke 6:15; Acts 1:13; R.V., “the Zealot”), because previous to his call to the apostleship he had been a member of the fanatical sect of the Zealots. There is no record regarding him.

(2.) The father of Judas Iscariot (John 6:71; 13:2, 26).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(contracted form of Simeon, a hearing). Son of Mattathias. [MACCABEES] Son of Onias the high priest, whose eulogy closes the "praise of famous men" in the book of Ecclesiasticus, ch. 4. (B.C. 302-293.) A "governor of the temple" in the time of Seleucus Philopator, whose information as to the treasures of the temple led to the sacrilegious attach of Heliordorus. 2 Macc. 3:4, etc. (B.C. 175.) Simon the brother of Jesus. The only undoubted notice of this Simon occurs in (Matthew 13:55; Mark 6:3) He has been identified by some writers with Simon the Canaanite, and still more generally with Symeon who became bishop of Jerusalem after the death of James, A.D. 62. The former of these opinions rests on no evidence whatever, nor is the later without its difficulties. Simon the Canaanite…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

1. One of the twelve apostles. See PETER.

2. The Canaanite, or Zelotes, one of the twelve apostles. See ZELOTES.

3. One of the "brethren" of Jesus, Mt 13:55 Mr 6:3. He is by some supposed to be the same with the preceding Simon Zelotes. See JAMES 3.

4. The Cyrenian, who was compelled to aid in bearing the cross of Jesus, Mt 27:32, probably on account of his known attachment to His cause. He was "the father of Alexander and Rufus," Mr 15:21; and from the cordial salutation of Paul, Ro 16:13, it would seem that the family afterwards resided at Rome, and that their labor of love was not forgotten by God.

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

that hears; that obeys

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

96%simon

simon96% · 73×simon?3% · 2×other renderings1% · 1×

76 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject41%adverbial16%object15%predicate9%indirect object7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

δέbut, on the otheπρόςὄνομαname, character,

καίand, even, also, nam

ἉλφαῖοςAlphaeusἸωσήφPropΘαδδαῖοςThaddaeus

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakκαταδιώκωI hunt down, folπρός

οἰκίαa house, household

ὁArticle theἐν

ἀδελφόςa brother

ὁArticle theδύο

ΣίμωνSimon75×

what comes after →

ΠέτροςPeter

καίand, even, also,κύριοςlord, Lord, mastλέγωI say, speak

ὁArticle the

λέγωI say, speakΚαναναῖοςa Canaaniteλεπρόςa leper

καίand, even, also, nam

ἈνδρέαςAndrewλέγωI say, speakἸούδαςJudah, Judas, Ju

λέγωI say, speak

ἐπιστάτηςmaster, teacherὑπολαμβάνωI take up, receiδέομαιI request, beg

ἸσκαριώθIscariot, a man of K

οὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΣίμων · 75× in the New Testament

John Luke Acts Mark Matthew

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ΠέτροςPeter×τὶς×οἰκίαa house, household×ἀδελφόςa brother×ἸούδαςJudah, Judas, Jude×ἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply×ἈνδρέαςAndrew×ἸωάννηςJohn×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.280c. AD 75–95

γνοὺς γὰρ ὁ Δαυίδης τὴν τῶν Ζιφηνῶν κακοήθειαν καὶ τὴν τοῦ βασιλέως ἔφοδον ἐκλείπει μὲν τὰ στενὰ τῆς ἐκείνων χώρας, φεύγει δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν μεγάλην πέτραν τὴν οὖσαν ἐν τῇ Σίμωνος ἐρήμῳ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 8th c. AD

ZPE 18 (1975), p. 270 [O. Mich. 4 1119]Karanis (Arsinoites)10 BC–9 BC

Βακχιάδος α πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι οε, β ογ, γ πη δ ξδ, ναύλου τούτων Αν. Σίμων ἐσφράγισα.

P.Fouad 1 18Oxyrhyncha (Arsinoites)AD 54

οὐλὴ ἀντικνημίῳ ἀριστερῷ Πετσῖρις πρεσβύτερος Θευώνιος ἐτῶν με οὐλὴ δακτύλῳ μικρῷ χειρὸς ἀριστερᾶς Διόδωρος Σίμωνος ὡς ἐτῶν νε οὐλὴ ὀφρύι δεξιᾷ Νεφερῶς Πατωῆτος ἐτῶν λ οὐλὴ τραχήλῳ ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς

Aegyptus 22 (1942), p. 71ArsinoitesAD 138–AD 149

Πτο Κρίσπου δραχμαὶ Βχλβ Ἀπίωνος κομανοῦ δραχμαὶ χλβ διώβολον Πτολεμαίου Διοσκόρου δραχμαὶ ξ Ἀλεξάνδρου Σίμωνος δραχμαὶ … γίνονται τῶν ἐπὶ πόλεως δραχμαὶ … φόρων δραχμαὶ … ε

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ἈνδρέανAndreas Andrew G406 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Andrew means manly and refers to one of Jesus' twelve apostles, as seen in Matthew 4:18 and Mark 1:16. He was a key figure in the early Christian church. Andrew is mentioned in the Gospels and Acts.

Amplified meaning

meaning 'manly', a key figure

Tyndale gloss

Andrew

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἀνδρέας (transliterated as Andreas) refers to Andrew, an apostle and brother of Simon Peter. It is derived from a root meaning 'manly' and appears in various New Testament passages, including Matthew 4:18 and John 1:41. The entries consistently identify Andrew as a significant figure in early Christianity.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἀνδρέας, -ου, ὁ,

Andrew, the Apostle: Mt 4:18 10:2, Mk 1:16, 29 3:18 13:3, Lk 6:14, Jo 1:41, 45 6:8 12:22, Ac 1:13.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

᾿Ανδρέας, -ov, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ; B. D. 5. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ: Jn. i. 40, 44 (41, 45); vi.8; xii. 22; Mt.iv.18; x.2; Mk.i. 16, 29; iii. 18; xiii. 3; Lk. vi.14; Actsi. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

᾿Ανδρέας. To the occurrences of this Greek name we may add Sy// 301°, atmemorial inscription of ii/B.c. — Av8péas kal’ ᾿Αριστόpaxos ᾿Αργεῖοι ἐποίησαν. The form’ Avdpfas is found in Priene 31.358 (i/B.c.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἀνδρέας (Andreas) — Andrew.

Ἀνδρέας, -ου, ὁ

Andrew, the Apostle: Mat.4:18 10:2, Mrk.1:16, 29 3:18 13:3, Luk.6:14, Jhn.1:41, 45 6:8 12:22, Act.1:13.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἀνδρέας

Andreas

from 435; manly; Andreas, an Israelite:--Andrew.

see GREEK for 435

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἀνδρέας, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Andrew

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἀνδρέας Andreas 13x

Andrew, pr. name

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

an'-droo (Andreas, i.e. "manly." The name has also been interpreted as "the mighty one, or conqueror"): Andrew was the first called of the Twelve Apostles.

I. In New Testament.

1. Early History and First Call:

Andrew belonged to Bethsaida of Galilee (compare Joh 1:44). He was the brother of Simon Peter and his father's name was John (compare Joh 1:42; 21:15,16,17). He occupies a more prominent place in the Gospel of Joh than in the synoptical writings, and this is explicable at least in part from the fact that Andrew was Greek both in language and sympathies (compare infra), and that his subsequent labors were intimately connected with the people for whom Joh was immediately writing. There are three stages in the call of Andrew to the apostleship. The first is described in

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Andrew

Manliness, a Greek name; one of the apostles of our Lord. He was of Bethsaida in Galilee (John 1:44), and was the brother of Simon Peter (Matt. 4:18; 10:2). On one occasion John the Baptist, whose disciple he then was, pointing to Jesus, said, “Behold the Lamb of God” (John 1:40); and Andrew, hearing him, immediately became a follower of Jesus, the first of his disciples. After he had been led to recognize Jesus as the Messiah, his first care was to bring also his brother Simon to Jesus. The two brothers seem to have after this pursued for a while their usual calling as fishermen, and did not become the stated attendants of the Lord till after John’s imprisonment (Matt.…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(manly), one of the apostles of our Lord, (John 1:40; Matthew 4:18) brother of Simon Peter. He was of Bethsaida, and had been a disciple of John the Baptist, leaving him to follow our Lord. By his means his brother Simon was brought to Jesus. (John 1:41) His place among the apostles seems to have been fourth, next after the three Peter, James and John, and in company with Philip. (Mark 3:18; Acts 1:13) The traditions about him are various. He is said to have preached in Scythia, in Greece, in Asia Minor and Thrace, and to have been crucified at Patrae in Achaia.

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

One of the twelve apostles, was of Bethsaida, and the brother of Peter, Joh 1:40,44. Being a disciple of John the Baptists, he understood the imitations of his master as to the Lamb of God, and was the first of the apostles to follow him, Joh 1:35-40, and come to the knowledge of the Messiah. Compare Jas 4:8. He was afterwards called as an apostle, on the shore of the Sea of Galilee, Mt 4:18; and thenceforth followed Christ to the end, Mr 13:3 Joh 6:7 12:22. Of his later history nothing is known with certainty. It seems probable, however, that after preaching the gospel…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%andrew

andrew100% · 13×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject62%object15%adverbial8%predicate8%indirect object8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

ΠέτροςPeterΣίμωνSimonἸωάννηςJohn

εἰμίI am, exist

πόλιςa city

ὁArticle the

αὐτός

μαθητήςa learner, disci

ὁArticle the

λέγωI say, speak

ἈνδρέαςAndrew13×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brother

καίand, even, also, nam

ΦίλιπποςPhilipΠέτροςPeter

μετά

ἸάκωβοςJames

ἔρχομαιI come, go

ἈνδρέαςAndrew

ΦίλιπποςPhilip

καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἈνδρέας · 13× in the New Testament

John Mark Matthew Acts Luke

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀδελφόςa brother×ΣίμωνSimon×ΠέτροςPeter×ΦίλιπποςPhilip×ἸάκωβοςJames×ἔρχομαιI come, go×ἈνδρέαςAndrew×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 12.18c. AD 75–95

καιρὸν δʼ ἐπιτήδειον τοῦτον εἶναι δοκιμάσας τῆς δεήσεως πρώτοις περὶ τούτου διαλέγεται τοῖς ἄρχουσι τῶν σωματοφυλάκων Σωσιβίῳ τῷ Ταραντίνῳ καὶ Ἀνδρέᾳ, συναγωνίσασθαι περὶ ὧν ἐντυγχάνειν μέλλει τῷ βασιλεῖ παρακαλῶν αὐτούς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Lond. 2 p. 272-273 no. 233Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 345

μετὰ τὴν ὑπατείαν Φλαουίου Λεοντίου καὶ Ἰουλίου Σαλουστίου τῶν λαμπροτάτων Μεχὶρ ζ. Αὐρήλιος Εὐλόγειος Ἀνδρέα ἔναρχος πρύτανις προπολιτευόμενος τῆς Ἀρσινοιτῶν πόλεως Φλαουίῳ Ἀβενναίῳ ἀπὸ ἐπάρχων εἴλης χαίρειν. ἀπαντοῦντί σοι

P.Oxy. 49 3481OxyrhynchosAD 442

Αὐρήλιος Ἀνδρέας Δημητρίου κυβερνήτης πλοίου Θέωνος περιβλέπτου μεμέτρημαι καὶ ἐνεβαλόμην εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ ὑπʼ ἐμὲ πλοῖον

BGU 12 2158HermopolisAD 485

Ἰων … … Πέτρου ὁ προκείμενος ἀπὸ Ἑρμουπόλεως μεμίσθωμαι ὡς πρόκειται. … … Ἰωάννης Ἀνδρέου ἀπὸ Ἑρμουπόλεως μαρτυρῶ τῇ μισθώσει ἀκούσας παρὰ τοῦ θεμένου Αὐρήλιος Κολλ … … τα

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ἀδελφὸνadelphos brother G80 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

343× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for brother refers to a male sibling or a fellow Christian, as seen in Matthew 1:2 and 1 Corinthians 1:1. It implies a close relationship.

Amplified meaning

male sibling, fellow

Tyndale gloss

brother

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀδελφός is built from a copulative particle and δελφύς, meaning 'womb.' It primarily refers to a brother, either by birth or in a broader sense, such as a fellow Christian or a member of the same nation. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including familial and spiritual relationships, as seen in Matthew 1:2 and 1 Corinthians 1:1.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀδελφός, -οῦ, ὁ

(< ἀ- copul., δελφύς, womb),

in cl., a brother, born of the same parent or parents. [In LXX (Hort, Ja., 102 f.), for אָח;]

lit. of a brother (Ge 4:2, al.).

Of a neighbour (Le 19:17).

Of a member of the same nation (Ex 2:14, De 15:3). In NT in each of these senses (1. Mt 1:2, al.; 2. Mt 7:3; 3. Ro 9:3) and also,

of a fellow-Christian: I Co 1:1, Ac 9:30. This usage finds…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀδελφός, -οῦ, ὁ, (fr. a copulative and δελφύς, from the same womb; cf. ἀγάστωρ), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only of the same father or the same mother): Mt. i. 2; iv. 18, and often. That ‘the brethren of Jesus,’ Mt. xii. 46, 47 [but WH only in mrg.]; xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 3 (in the last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 sq.; Jn. ii. 12; vii. 8; Acts i. 14; Gal. i. 19; 1 Co. 1. 5, are neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary (which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [ef. Thilo, Cod. Apocr. N. T. i. 8362 sq.]), nor cousins, the children of Alpheus or Cleophas [i. 6. Clopas] and Mary a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Ausustine [ef. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal., diss. ii.]), according to that use of language by which ἀδελφός like the Hebr. τὶ denotes any…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀδελφός. For the literal and the more general derived sense we may quote Sy// 474° ἀδελφοὶ ols κοινὰ τὰ πατρῷα, and 276" διὰ τὸ Μεσσαλιήτας εἶναι ἡμῖν ἀδελφούς]. In P Lond 421 (B.C. 168) (= I. p. 30, Selections p. 9) ᾿Ισίας Ἡφαιστίωνι τῶι ἀδελφῶ[ι χαί(ρειν)], it seems probable that Isias is

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀδελφός (adelphos) — brother.

ἀδελφός [ᾰ],

(ἀ- copulative, δελφύς, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; compare ἀγάστωρ) properly, son of the same mother:

I. as substantive, ἀδελφός, ὁ, vocative ἄδελφ; Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, and Lyric poetry ἀδελφεός (genitive -ειοῦ in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—brother, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀδελφοί brother and sister, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so of the Ptolemies, θεοὶ ἀδελφοί[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων ἀδελφεός[LXX+5th c.BC+]

I.2. kinsman,[LXX]; tribesman, Ex.[Refs]

I.3. colleague, associate, [Refs]; member of a college, [Refs]

I.4. term of address, used by kings, [LXX+2nd c.BC+], etc.:—as a term of affection, applicable by wife to husband, [LXX+2nd c.BC+]

I.5. brother (as a fellow Christian), [NT]; of other religious communities, e.g. Serapeum, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀδελφός

adelphos

from 1 (as a connective particle) and delphus (the womb); a brother

(literally or figuratively) near or remote (much like 1):--brother.

see GREEK for 1

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀδελφός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a brother

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀδελφός adelphos 343x

a brother, near kinsman or relative; one of the same nation or nature; one of equal rank and dignity; an associate, a member of the Christian community

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀδελφός α copul. , δελφύς; cf. Lat. couterinus ἀδελφοί are properly sons of the same mother:

as Subst., ἀδελφός, ὁ, voc. ἄδελφε (not -φέ), ionic ἀδελφεός, epic -ειός:—a brother, or generally, a near kinsman, ἀδελφοί brother and sister, like Lat. fratres, Eur.; ἀδελφεοὶ ἀπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων brothers by both parents, i. e. not half-brothers, Hdt.

a brother (as a fellow Christian), NTest.

adj., ἀδελφός, ή, όν, brotherly or sisterly, Trag., Plat.

like Lat. geminus, gemellus, of anything in pairs, twin, Xen.:—then, just like, c. gen. or dat., ἀδελφὰ τῶνδε, ἀδελφὰ τούτοισι Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

bruth'-er ('ach; adelphos = kin by birth, from the same parents or parent): Used extensively in both Old Testament and New Testament of other relations and relationships, and expanding under Christ's teaching to include the universal brotherhood of man. Chiefly employed in the natural sense, as of Cain and Abel (Ge 4:8); of Joseph and his brethren (Ge 42:3); of Peter and Andrew, of James and John (Mt 10:2). Of other relationships:

(1) Abram's nephew, Lot, is termed "brother" (Ge 14:14);

(2) Moses' fellow-countrymen are "brethren" (Ex 2:11; Ac 3:22; compare

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Brother

(1.) In the natural and common sense (Matt. 1:2; Luke 3:1, 19).

(2.) A near relation, a cousin (Gen. 13:8; 14:16; Matt. 12:46; John 7:3; Acts 1:14; Gal. 1:19).

(3.) Simply a fellow-countryman (Matt. 5:47; Acts 3:22; Heb. 7:5).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The Hebrew word is used in various senses in the Old Testament, as, Any kinsman, and not a mere brother; e.g. nephew, (Genesis 13:8; 14:16) husband, (Solomon 4:9) One of the same tribe. (2 Samuel 19:13) Of the same people, (Exodus 2:11) or even of a cognate people. (Numbers 20:14) An ally. (Amos 1:9) Any friend, (Job 5:15) One of the same office. (1 Kings 9:13) A fellow man. (Leviticus 19:17) Metaphorically of any similarity, as in (

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Signifies in Scripture the son of the same parent or parents, Mt 1:2 Lu 6:14; a cousin or near kinsman, Ge 13:8 14:16 Joh 7:3 Ac 1:14; one of the same stock or country, Mt 5:47 Ac 3:22 Heb 7:5; a fellow-man, and equal, Mt 5:23 7:3; one beloved, 2Sa 1:26; Christians, as sons of God, Ac 9:30 11:29. In

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%brothers

brothers64% · 223×brother35% · 121×other renderings1% · 4×

348 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject25%object20%adverbial12%indirect object6%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 343 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἸωάννηςJohnἈνδρέαςAndrew

σύ

δέbut, on the otheπερίἀδελφόςa brother

ἀνήρa male human being,

λέγωI say, speakποιέωI do, makeφημίI say

δέbut, on the other ha

σύἐγώπαραδίδωμιI hand over, del

οὖνtherefore, then

ἄραDisjἑπτάIndecλοιπόςleft, left behin

ἀδελφόςbrother343×

what comes after →

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theἐν

ἐγώ

καίand, even, also,ἀγαπητόςloved, belovedὁArticle the

σύ

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ὡςas, like as, how

ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἐκκλησίαan assembly, conεὐαγγέλιονthe good news, t

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theἀδελφήa sisterπατήρfather, Father,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀδελφός · 343× in the New Testament

Acts 1 Corinthians Matthew Luke Mark 1 Thessalonians James Romans 1 John John 2 Corinthians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀνήρa male human being, a man×παρακαλέωI summon, entreat, admonish, comfort×ἸάκωβοςJames×ἀγαπητόςloved, beloved×ἀδελφήa sister×ἈνδρέαςAndrew×ἀγνοέωI do not know, am ignorant of×ΣίμωνSimon×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אָחbrother90%H251 · 380 verses

Counted over the 419 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.53c. AD 75–95

οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀδελφοὶ διαφόροις ἔχαιρον ἐπιτηδεύμασιν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.10c. AD 100

ἀκριβεύεσθαι οὖν ὀφείλομεν, ἀδελφοί, περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας ἡμῶν, ἵνα μὴ ὁ πονηρὸς παρείσδυσιν πλάνης ποιήσας ἐν ἡμῖν ἐκσφενδονήσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς ζωῆς ἡμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου μέρει τοῦ ἐν Παθύρει

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

αὐτοῦautos of him G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.

Tyndale gloss

it/s/he

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

52%him

him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus

πρός

λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god

αὐτόςof him5550×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὅς

εἰς

ὁArticle theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, question, demand of×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

τοῦho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ΣίμωνοςSimōn of Simon G4613 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Simon is a Greek name used in the Bible for several Israelites, including Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot. It appears in Matthew, Mark, Luke, and Acts. Simon was also the name of one of Jesus' brothers and the father of Judas Iscariot.

Tyndale gloss

Simon

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Σίμων (i.e., *Simos*) is a name used for several figures in the New Testament, including Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot. It is derived from Hebrew and commonly appears in various contexts, such as Simon of Cyrene and Simon the Pharisee. The lexicons note that it can also refer to a proverbial expression for a confederate in evil and a name related to a throw of dice.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Σίμων, -ωνος, ὁ

a Greek name (transliterated סִימוֺן in Heb.) used as a substitute for Συμεών (q.v.), Simon

Simon Peter: Mt 17:25, Mk 1:29, al.

Simon the Zealot (v.s. ζηλωτής, Καναναῖος): Mt 10:4, Mk 3:18, Lk 6:15, Ac 1:13.

One of the Brethren of our Lord (v.s. ἀδελψός): Mt 13:55, Mk 6:3.

The father of Judas Iscariot, himself surnamed Ἰσκαριώτης (q.v.): Jo 6:71 12:4 (Rec.) 13:2, 26

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Σίμων, -wvos [B. 16 (14)], 6, (jipnw, ‘a hearing’, fr. ynw ‘to hear’; [there was also a Grk. name Σίμων (allied w. σιμός, i.e. ‘flat-nosed’; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p. 210), but cf. B. D.s. v. Simon init.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p- 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt. xvii. 25; Mk. i. 29sq. 36; Lk. iv. 38; v. 4sq. 10, ete.; see Πέτρος. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbzus [cf. s.V. Ἰούδας, 8], an apostle, who is called Kavavirns [so RG, but 1, T Tr WH -vaios, q.v.], Mt. x. 4; Mk. iii. 18, and ζηλωτής, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of Jesus [cf. s. v. ἀδελφός, 1]: Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3. 4. a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed Ἰσκαριὦτης (see Ἰούδας, 6) ]: Jn. vi. 71; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6. a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 48 54.. who appears to [some, e. g. Grotius…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Σίμων, a Greek name used as a substitute for Συμεών (7.v.) owing to similarity of sound (cf. Deissmann 8S, p. 315). The name is common in the papyri and need not necessarily refer to Jews, cf. P Lille I. 53°(B.c. 260-259), P Fay 14! (B.c. 124), P Tebt I. 4315 (B.c. 118), BGU IV. 11293 (B.c. 13), P Lond 1177729 (a.p. 113) (= III. p. 187), and BGU III. 9137 (A.D. 206).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Σίμων (Simōn) — Simon.

Σίμων [ῐ], ωνος, ὁ,

[Refs], used proverbial of a confederate in evil, οἶδα Σίμωνα καὶ Σ. ἐμέ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. name of a throw of the dice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

∑ίμων

Simon

of Hebrew origin (8095); Simon (i.e. Shimon), the name of nine

Israelites:--Simon. Compare 4826.

see GREEK for 4826

see HEBREW for 08095

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Σίμων, ωνος, ὁ

n.m.

Simon

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Σίμων Simōn 75x

Simon, pr. name. (1) Simon Peter, Mt. 4:18. (2) Simon (the Canaanite) the Zealot, Mt. 10:4; Acts 1:13 . (3) Simon, brother of Jesus, Mt. 13:55; Mk. 6:3. (4) Simon, the leper, Mt. 26:6; Mk. 14:3. (5) Simon, the Pharisee, Lk. 7:40. (6) Simon of Cyrene, Mt. 27:32. (7) Simon, father of Judas Iscariot, Jn. 6:71. (8) Simon, the sorcerer, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Simon

The abbreviated form of Simeon. (1.) One of the twelve apostles, called the Canaanite (Matt. 10:4; Mark 3:18). This word “Canaanite” does not mean a native of Canaan, but is derived from the Syriac word Kanean or Kaneniah, which was the name of a Jewish sect. The Revised Version has “Cananaean;” marg., “or Zealot” He is also called “Zelotes” (Luke 6:15; Acts 1:13; R.V., “the Zealot”), because previous to his call to the apostleship he had been a member of the fanatical sect of the Zealots. There is no record regarding him.

(2.) The father of Judas Iscariot (John 6:71; 13:2, 26).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(contracted form of Simeon, a hearing). Son of Mattathias. [MACCABEES] Son of Onias the high priest, whose eulogy closes the "praise of famous men" in the book of Ecclesiasticus, ch. 4. (B.C. 302-293.) A "governor of the temple" in the time of Seleucus Philopator, whose information as to the treasures of the temple led to the sacrilegious attach of Heliordorus. 2 Macc. 3:4, etc. (B.C. 175.) Simon the brother of Jesus. The only undoubted notice of this Simon occurs in (Matthew 13:55; Mark 6:3) He has been identified by some writers with Simon the Canaanite, and still more generally with Symeon who became bishop of Jerusalem after the death of James, A.D. 62. The former of these opinions rests on no evidence whatever, nor is the later without its difficulties. Simon the Canaanite…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

1. One of the twelve apostles. See PETER.

2. The Canaanite, or Zelotes, one of the twelve apostles. See ZELOTES.

3. One of the "brethren" of Jesus, Mt 13:55 Mr 6:3. He is by some supposed to be the same with the preceding Simon Zelotes. See JAMES 3.

4. The Cyrenian, who was compelled to aid in bearing the cross of Jesus, Mt 27:32, probably on account of his known attachment to His cause. He was "the father of Alexander and Rufus," Mr 15:21; and from the cordial salutation of Paul, Ro 16:13, it would seem that the family afterwards resided at Rome, and that their labor of love was not forgotten by God.

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

that hears; that obeys

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

96%simon

simon96% · 73×simon?3% · 2×other renderings1% · 1×

76 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject41%adverbial16%object15%predicate9%indirect object7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

δέbut, on the otheπρόςὄνομαname, character,

καίand, even, also, nam

ἉλφαῖοςAlphaeusἸωσήφPropΘαδδαῖοςThaddaeus

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakκαταδιώκωI hunt down, folπρός

οἰκίαa house, household

ὁArticle theἐν

ἀδελφόςa brother

ὁArticle theδύο

Σίμωνof Simon75×

what comes after →

ΠέτροςPeter

καίand, even, also,κύριοςlord, Lord, mastλέγωI say, speak

ὁArticle the

λέγωI say, speakΚαναναῖοςa Canaaniteλεπρόςa leper

καίand, even, also, nam

ἈνδρέαςAndrewλέγωI say, speakἸούδαςJudah, Judas, Ju

λέγωI say, speak

ἐπιστάτηςmaster, teacherὑπολαμβάνωI take up, receiδέομαιI request, beg

ἸσκαριώθIscariot, a man of K

οὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΣίμων · 75× in the New Testament

John Luke Acts Mark Matthew

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ΠέτροςPeter×τὶς×οἰκίαa house, household×ἀδελφόςa brother×ἸούδαςJudah, Judas, Jude×ἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply×ἈνδρέαςAndrew×ἸωάννηςJohn×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.280c. AD 75–95

γνοὺς γὰρ ὁ Δαυίδης τὴν τῶν Ζιφηνῶν κακοήθειαν καὶ τὴν τοῦ βασιλέως ἔφοδον ἐκλείπει μὲν τὰ στενὰ τῆς ἐκείνων χώρας, φεύγει δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν μεγάλην πέτραν τὴν οὖσαν ἐν τῇ Σίμωνος ἐρήμῳ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 8th c. AD

ZPE 18 (1975), p. 270 [O. Mich. 4 1119]Karanis (Arsinoites)10 BC–9 BC

Βακχιάδος α πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι οε, β ογ, γ πη δ ξδ, ναύλου τούτων Αν. Σίμων ἐσφράγισα.

P.Fouad 1 18Oxyrhyncha (Arsinoites)AD 54

οὐλὴ ἀντικνημίῳ ἀριστερῷ Πετσῖρις πρεσβύτερος Θευώνιος ἐτῶν με οὐλὴ δακτύλῳ μικρῷ χειρὸς ἀριστερᾶς Διόδωρος Σίμωνος ὡς ἐτῶν νε οὐλὴ ὀφρύι δεξιᾷ Νεφερῶς Πατωῆτος ἐτῶν λ οὐλὴ τραχήλῳ ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς

Aegyptus 22 (1942), p. 71ArsinoitesAD 138–AD 149

Πτο Κρίσπου δραχμαὶ Βχλβ Ἀπίωνος κομανοῦ δραχμαὶ χλβ διώβολον Πτολεμαίου Διοσκόρου δραχμαὶ ξ Ἀλεξάνδρου Σίμωνος δραχμαὶ … γίνονται τῶν ἐπὶ πόλεως δραχμαὶ … φόρων δραχμαὶ … ε

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ἀμφιβάλλονταςballō net-casting G6006 Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine ¶

108× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

In plain English

Tyndale gloss

to throw: throw

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAP-APM — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See MOLDING

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%net-casting

net-casting100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ἀμφίβληστρονamphiblēstron a net G293 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter ¶

1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

In plain English

Meaning

A net is a fishing net thrown around fish. The Bible uses this word in Matthew 4:18 to describe the nets used by fishermen like Peter.

Tyndale gloss

net

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀμφίβληστρον, transliterated as amphiblestron, refers to a casting-net used in fishing, something thrown around like a garment. It appears in the New Testament in Matthew 4:18 and Mark 1:16. The term is derived from the verb ἀμφιβάλλω, meaning to throw around, and can also metaphorically refer to fetters or garments.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — δίκτυον, ἀμφίβληστρον, σαγήνη from a scan

Ovr English word ‘net’ will, in a general way, cover all these three, which yet are capable of a more accurate discrimination one from the other. Aixrvov (=‘rete,’ “ retia’), from the old δικεῖν, to cast, which appears again in δίσκος, a quoit, is the more general name for all nets, and would include the hunting net, and the net with which birds are taken (Prov. i. 17), as well as the fishing, although used only of the latter in the Ν, T. (Matt. iv. 20; John xxi. 6). It is often in the Septuagint employed in that figurative sense in which St. Paul uses παγίς (Rom. xi. 9; 1 Tim. iii. 7), and is indeed associated with it (Job xviii. 8; Prov. xxix. 5). ᾿Αμφίβληστρον and σαγήνη are varieties of fishing nets ; they are named together, Hab. i. 15; and in Plutarch (De Soler. Anim. 26), who joins γρῖπος with σαγήνη, ὑποχή with ἀμφίβληστρον. ᾿Αμφίβληστρον--- οὐ only in the N. T. at Matt. iv. 18…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀμφίβληστρον, -ου, τό

(< ἀμφιβάλλω),

[in LXX chiefly for חֵרֶם;]

something thrown around, as a garment; spec., a casting-net: Mt 4:18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀμφίβληστρον, -ov, τό, (ἀμφιβάλλω), in Grk. writ. anything thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains, a garment; spec. a net for fishing, [casting-net]: Mk. i. 16 RGL; Mt.iv.18. (Sept.; Hes. seut. 215; Hat. 1, 141; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Syn. see δίκτυον, and cf. Trench ὃ lxiv.; B. Ὁ. 5. v. net.]

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀμφίβληστρον (amphiblēstron) — net.

ἀμφίβληστρ-ον, τό,

anything thrown round:

1. casting-net, [NT+8th c.BC+]

1. b metaphorically, of the garment thrown like a net over Agamemnon, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of the shirt of Nessus, Ἐρινύων ὑφαντὸν ἀ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀμφίβληστρα σώματος ῥάκη rags thrown around body, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. fetter, bond, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. of encircling walls, ἀμφίβληστρα τοίχων[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀμφίβληστρον

amphiblestron

from a compound of the base of 297 and 906; a (fishing) net (as thrown

about the fish):--net.

see GREEK for 297

see GREEK for 906

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀμφίβληστρον, ου, τό

n.n.

a fishing net, drag-net

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀμφίβληστρον amphiblēstron 1x

pr. what is thrown around, e.g., a garment; a large kind of fishnet, Mt. 4:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀμφίβληστρον ἀμφιβάλλω anything thrown round:

a casting-net, Hes., Hdt.:—metaph. of the garment thrown like a net over Agamemnon, Aesch.

a fetter, bond, id. Aesch.

of walls, encompassment of city-walls, Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

See FISHING; FOWLER.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Net

In use among the Hebrews for fishing, hunting, and fowling. The fishing-net was probably constructed after the form of that used by the Egyptians (Isa. 19:8). There were three kinds of nets. (1.) The drag-net or hauling-net (Gr. sagene), of great size, and requiring many men to work it. It was usually let down from the fishing-boat, and then drawn to the shore or into the boat, as circumstances might require (Matt. 13:47, 48). (2.) The hand-net or casting-net (Gr. amphiblestron), which was thrown from a rock or a boat at any fish that might be seen (Matt. 4:18; Mark 1:16). It was called by the Latins funda. It was of circular form, “like the top of a tent.” (3.) The…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

[See FISHING]

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Of checker work 1Ki 7:17

→ Hidden in a pit Ps 35:7,8

→ Set for birds Pr 1:17

→ Wild animals Isa 51:20

→ Fish caught in Mt 4:18-21; 13:47; Lu 5:4; Joh 21:6-11

→ See SNARE

→ FIGURATIVE Job 18:8; 19:6; Ps 9:15; 10:9; 25:15; 31:4; 35:7,8; 57:6; 66:11; 140:5; 141:10; Pr 12:12; 29:5; Ec 7:26; 9:12;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%net

net100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceἀμφίβληστρον · 1× in the New Testament

Matthew

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ἐνen into G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνinto2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

τῇho the G3588 Article · dative · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

θαλάσσῃ·thalassa sea; G2281 Noun · dative · singular · feminine ¶

91× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for sea, used in the Bible to describe large bodies of water like the Mediterranean or Red Sea, as seen in Acts 10:6 and 1 Corinthians 10:1-2.

Amplified meaning

the lake, a large body of water

Tyndale gloss

sea

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θάλασσα (thalassa) means 'the sea' and is often used in the New Testament to refer to various bodies of water, including the Mediterranean and the Red Sea. It can also denote an inland lake, such as the Sea of Galilee. The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 23:15 and Acts 7:36. Some sources note its connection to the idea of agitation, but interpretations vary.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — θάλασσα, πέλαγος from a scan

THE connexion of θάλασσα with the verb ταράσσειν, that it means properly the agitated or disturbed, finds favour with 1 I cannot regard as an evidence of such reconsecration the wellknown words of Ignatius, Ad Rom. 7: ὃ ἐμὸς ἔρως ἐσταύρωται. It is far more consistent with the genius of these Ignatian Epistles to take épws subjectively here, ‘ My love of the world is crucified,’ .6. with Christ ; rather than objectively, ‘ Christ, the object of my love, is crucified.’ 2 Consult on ἔρως the noble fragment from Sophocles, preserved by Stobeeus : Νόσημ᾽ ἔρωτος τοῦτ᾽ ἐφίμερον κακόν. ἔχοιμ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸ μὴ κακῶς ἀπεικάσαι, ὅταν πάγου φανέντος αἰθρίου χεροῖν κρύσταλλον ἁρπάσωσι παῖδες ἀσταγῆ. τὰ πρῶτ᾽ ἔχουσιν ἡδονὰς ποταινίους, τέλος δ᾽ ὃ χυμὸς οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἀφῇ θέλει οὔτ᾽ ἐν χεροῖν τὸ κτῆμα σύμφορον μένειν. οὕτω γε τοὺς ἐρῶντας αὑτὸς ἵμερος δρᾶν καὶ τὸ μὴ δρᾶν πολλάκις προΐεται. §xul1 SYNONYMS OF THE…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θάλασσα, -ης, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for יָם;]

the sea: Mt 23:15, Mk 11:23, Lk 21:25, Ro 9:27, He 11:12, Ja 1:6, Ju 13, Re 7:1, al.; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θ. (v. Tr., ut infr.), Mt 18:6; ὁ οὐρανὸς κ. ἡ γῆ κ. ἡ θ., of the whole world, Ac 4:24, al. (Hg 2:7); θ. ὑαλίνη, Re 4:6 15:2; of the Mediterranean, Ac…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θάλασσα [cf. B. 7], -ns, 7, (akin to ads [better, allied to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing; ef. Vanitek, p. 303]; Sept. for D>), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinetion from πέλαγος see the latter word]; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2,6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix. 27; 2Co. xi. 26; Heb. xi. 12;,Jas.i.6; Jude 13; Rev. Vil. 1-3, ete.; ἐργάζεσθαι τὴν θάλ. (see ἐργάζομαι, 2 a.), Rey. xviii. 17; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς Bad. (see πέλαγος, a.), Mt. xviii. 6; joined with γῆ and οὐρανός it forms a periphrasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v. 13; x. 6 [L WHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hage. ii. 7; Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2,10,1]); among the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used [even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); Β. § 124, 8b.] of…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θάλασσα. BGU II. 4237 (ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 90) εὐχαριστῶ | | from Cnidus, Sy// 8152, where a woman devotes to Demeter (cf. 2 Cor 1178) ἔσωσε, P Oxy VII. 1067*9 (iii/A.D.) ἀγόρασόν ᾿ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι, ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν μοι ὀψαρίδιον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης (cf. Jn 2119), and from the inserr. Michel 372" (ii/B.c.) ἐργα[ζ]όμενός τε κατὰ θάλασσαν ἐργασίαν, 7. 52119 (ii/B.c.) κατὰ γῆς καὶ κατὰ θαλάσσας. For references to ἣ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα, as in Ac γ35, Heb 117%, cf. P Grenf I. 9% (iii/B.c.) ἐρ]υθρᾶι θαλάσσηι, OG/S 186° (B.C. 62) ὁ συγγενὴς καὶ ἐπιστράτηγος Kal στρατηγὸς τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης, 16. 190" (B.c. 51) ἐπὶ τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης : cf. also the intr. to P Ryl 11. 66 (late ii/p.c.). For the adj. θαλάττί--σσ-)ιος, see P Oxy I. 877 (A.D. 342) θαλαττίου ναυκληρίου, ‘a seagoing vessel,” 26. X. 1288® (iv/a.D.) eis διαγραφὴν πλύου θαλασσίας…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θάλασσα (thalassa) — sea.

θάλασσα [θᾰ],

Attic dialectθᾰλᾰμ-ττα [Refs] (but θάλασσα 22.236 [Refs 4th c.BC+], ἡ: —sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently of the Mediterranean sea, ἥδε ἡ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐντὸς καὶ κ. ἡ. λεγομένη θ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἡ ἔσω θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἡ ἔξω θ., of the Ocean, [Refs]; ἡ Ἀτλαντικὴ θ. [Refs]; ἡ μεγάλη θ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]; of a salt lake, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opposed to πεζῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to κατὰ γῆς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατά τε γῆν καὶ κατὰ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς θ. ἀνθεκτέα ἐστί one must engage in maritime affairs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ περὶ τὴν θ. sea-faring men, [Refs 4th c.BC+] a sea of troubles, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ Κρὴς τὴν θ. (i.e. ἀγνοεῖ), of pretended ignorance…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θάλασσα

thalassa

probably prolonged from 251; the sea (genitive case or

specially):--sea.

see GREEK for 251

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θάλασσα, ης, ἡ

n.f.

the sea, lake

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θάλασσα thalassa 91x

the sea, Mt. 23:15, Mk. 9:42; a sea, Acts 7:36; an inland sea, lake, Mt. 8:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θάλασσα the sea, Hom., etc.; when he uses it of a particular sea, he means the Mediterranean, opp. to Ὠκεανός; — Hdt. calls the Mediterranean ἥδε ἡ θάλασσα; so, ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θάλ. Plat.; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opp. to πεζῇ by land, Hdt.; to κατὰ γῆς, Thuc.:—metaph., κακῶν θ. a sea of troubles, Aesch.

a well of salt water, said to be produced by a stroke of Poseidon's trident, in the Acropolis at Athens, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

se (yam; thalassa; in Ac 27:5 pelagos): The Mediterranean is called ha-yam ha-gadhol, "the great sea" (Nu 34:6; Jos 1:4; Eze 47:10, etc.); ha-yam ha-'acharon, "the hinder," or "western sea" (De 11:24; 34:2; Joe 2:20; Zec 14:8); yam pelishtim, "the sea of the Philis" (Ex 23:31); the King James Version translates yam yapho' in Ezr 3:7 by "sea of Joppa," perhaps rightly.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The sea, yam , is used in Scripture to denote-- "The gathering of the waters," "the Ocean." (Genesis 1:2,10; 30:13) etc. Some portion of this, as the Mediterranean Sea, called the "hinder," the "western" and the "utmost" sea, (11:24; 34:2; Joel 2:20) "sea of the Philistines," (Exodus 23:31) "the great sea," (Numbers 36:6,7; Joshua 15:47) "the sea." Genesis49:13; Psal 80:11 Also frequently of the Red Sea. (Exodus 15:4) [RED SEA SEA] Inland lakes termed seas, as the Salt or Dead Sea. [See the special article] Any…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The Hebrews give the name of sea to any large collection of water, Job 14:11; as to the lakes of Tiberias and Asphaltites, and also to the rivers Nile and Euphrates, Isa 11:15 18:2 21:1 Jer 51:36,42. The principal seas mentioned in Scripture are the following:

1. The GREAT SEA, the Mediterranean, called also the Hinder or Western Sea. Indeed, the Hebrew word for sea, meaning the Mediterranean, is often put for the west. The Great Sea is 2,200 miles long, and in the widest part 1,200 miles in width. In many places it is so deep as to give no soundings. It is little affected by tides, but is often agitated by violent winds. The prevailing direction of the wind in spring is from the southeast and southwest and from the northeast…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Creation of Ge 1:9,10; Ps 95:5; 148:4,5

→ Lake Galilee calmed by Jesus Mt 8:24-26; Mr 4:37-39

→ Jesus walked upon Lake Galilee Mt 14:25-31

→ The Dead, to be given up by the, at the resurrection Re 20:13

→ SYMBOLICAL

In Daniel' s vision Da 7:2,3

In John' s apocalyptic vision Re 4:6; 8:8,9; 10:2,5,6,8; 13:1; 15:2; 16:3; 21:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

99%sea

sea99% · 89×other renderings1% · 1×

90 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial69%subject12%object10%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 91 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

εἰςἐπίἐν

ἐρυθρόςred

ἐνὁArticle the

παρά

οἰκίαa house, househoβυρσεύςa tanner

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

θρόνοςa throne, seatὁράωI see, look upon

ὁδόςa way, road, journey

ΝεφθαλίμProp

θάλασσαsea;91×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

πᾶςall, the whole, γίνομαιI come into beinὁArticle the

ὁArticle the

ΓαλιλαίαGalileeΤιβεριάςTiberiasδίκηjustice, judicia

εἰμίI am, exist

γάρforκαίand, even, also,

περιπατέωI walk, conduct my l

ταράσσωI agitate, stir δοκέωI think, seem, a

εἰς

ὁArticle theΚαφαρναούμProp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθάλασσα · 91× in the New Testament

Revelation Mark Matthew Acts John Luke 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians James Jude Romans

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπί×παρά×γῆthe earth, soil, land×βάλλωI cast, throw, rush, put, place, drop×πέρανover, beyond×ΓαλιλαίαGalilee×περιπατέωI walk, conduct my life×ἄνεμοςthe wind×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יָםsea84%H3220 · 189 verses

Counted over the 224 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 84c. AD 40

οὐ γὰρ ἀναπτῆναι, φησίν, εἰς οὐρανὸν οὐδὲ πέραν θαλάσσης ἀφικέσθαι δεῖ κατὰ ζήτησιν τοῦ καλοῦ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.31c. AD 75–95

τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἵστησι τὴν γῆν ἀναχέας περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν θάλασσαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.5c. AD 100

ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD

O.Berenike 2 124 RoBerenikeAD 50–AD 75

σηδυω … … … αμβα. … … ηρου … ε … ω θαλασσα … α … … … ἠλλαχέναι σοι

749339Myos HormosAD 93

ἐν Μυὸς Ὅρμωι τῶι πρὸς τῇ ἐρυθρᾷ θαλάσσῃ ἔτους δωδεκάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Φαμενὼθ ἐνάτῃ καὶ εἰκάδι Ἀμμώνιος Εὐδαίμονος Πέρσης

BGU 2 423Misenum? (Italien)AD 101–AD 200

θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς καὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ μου. εὐχαριστῶ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν ἔσωσε εὐθέως. ὅτε εἰσῆλθον εἰς Μησήνους, ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς καὶ καλῶς

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ἦσανeimi they were G1510 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural ¶

2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.

Tyndale gloss

to be

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-IAI-3P — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

26%is

is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς

οὗτος

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god

ἐγώ

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά

σύ

ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

εἰμίthey were2457×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegγάρfor

ἐν

ὁArticle theσύαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t

ἐγώ

εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, deserving×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

γὰρgar for G1063 Conjunction ¶

1,038× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

For is a word used to explain or give a reason, often introducing a justification or clarification, as seen in Matthew 4:18 and Romans 7:1. It's a conjunction that connects ideas and provides additional information.

Amplified meaning

because, since

Tyndale gloss

for

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γάρ (gar) is a coordinating particle primarily used to introduce reasons or explanations, similar to 'for' in English. It can serve various functions, including causal, explicative, and conclusive, and is often placed after the first word in a clause. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts that clarify or justify preceding statements, aligning with its classical usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γάρ,

co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα,

verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.;

explicative and epexegetic: Mt 4:18 19:12, Mk 1:16 5:42 16:4, Lk 11:30, Ro 7:1, I Co 16:5, al.

Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mt 9:5 27:23, Lk 9:25 22:27, Jo 9:30, Ac 8:31 16:37 19:35,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, γέ and dpa (i. 4. ἄρ), is properly a particle of affirmation and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily as the case stands, “ the thing is first aflirmed by the particle yé, and then is referred to what precedes by the force of the particle dpa” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p. 232; οἵ. Kiihner ii. p. 724; [Jelf § 786; W. 445 (415) sq-]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently the reason and nature of something previously mentioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use of this particle, either the reason and cause of a foregoing statement is added, whence arises the causal or argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam, enim; Germ. denn) ; or some previous declaration is explained, whence γάρ takes on an ex plicative force: YP Sor, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmilich). Thus the force of the…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γάρ (gar) — for.

γάρ

(γε, ἄρα), causal conjunction, used alone or with other Particles.

I. introducing the reason or cause of what precedes, for, τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε θεὰ λευκώλενος Ἥρη· κήδετο γ. Δαναῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but frequently in explanation of that which is implied in the preceding clause, πολλάων πολίων κατέλυσε κάρηνα.. τοῦ γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον [Refs]

I. b in simple explanations, especially after a Pronoun or demonstrative adjective, ἀλλὰ τόδ᾽ αἰνὸν ἄχος κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἱκάνει· Ἕκτωρ γ. ποτε φήσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ δὲ δεινότατον.. ὁ Ζεὺς γ... [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in introducing proofs or examples, μαρτύριον δέ· Δήλου γ. καθαιρομένης.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τεκμήριον δέ· οὔτε γ. Λακεδαιμόνιοι.. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in full, τεκμήριον δὲ…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

γάρ

gar

a primary particle; properly, assigning a reason (used in argument,

explanation or intensification; often with other particles):--and, as,

because (that), but, even, for, indeed, no doubt, seeing, then,

therefore, verily, what, why, yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γάρ

Cj.

for

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γάρ gar 1x

for; it is, however, frequently used with an ellipsis of the clause to which it has reference, and its force must then be variously expressed: Mt. 15:27; 27:23, et al.; it is also sometimes epexegetic, or introductory of an intimated detail of circumstances, now, then, Mt. 1:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γάρ for, Lat. enim, and like it, regularly placed after the first word of a sentence: to introduce the reason:

ARGUMENTATIVE, to introduce the reason for a statement, which usually precedes:—when it precedes the statement, it may be rendered since, as, Ἀτρείδη, πολλοὶ γὰρ τεθνᾶσιν Ἀχαιοί, χρὴ πόλεμον παῦσαι Il.

the statement of which γάρ gives the reason may be omitted, οὐ γάρ τί μοι Ζεὺς ἦν ὁ κηρύξας τάδε [yes], for it was not Zeus, etc., Soph.; ἔστι γὰρ οὕτω [yes], for so it is, i. e. yes certainly, Plat.; οἵδ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ εἰσί: τοῦτο γάρ σε δήξεται [I say this], for it will sting thee, Eur.: —in Conditional Propositions, where the Condition is omitted, it may be transl. for otherwise, else, οὐ γὰρ ἄν με ἔπεμπον πάλιν, (sc. εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευον)…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

97%for

for97% · 1050×other renderings3% · 33×

1,083 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,038 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςἐγώσύ

οὐNeg

οὐδείςno one, none, noαὐτόςλαλέωI speak, say

εἰμίI am, exist

θάλασσαthe sea, lakeλυπέωI pain, grieve, καθεύδωI sleep, am slee

οὗτος

εἰςαὐτόςδιά

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existκύριοςlord, Lord, mastἐγώ

γάρfor1038×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a godὁArticle the

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theσύἐν

σύ

ὅτιthat, since, becἐνοὐNeg

αὐτός

ὁArticle theοὗτοςλέγωI say, speak

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theδιάἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγάρ · 1,038× in the New Testament

Romans Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke Hebrews Acts 2 Corinthians John Mark Galatians 1 Thessalonians Revelation

1 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ὥσπερjust as, as×τοιοῦτος×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

Archiv für Papyrusforschung (AfP) 2 (1903), p. 517-518Pathyris131 BC

ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν ἐν τῶι Τῦβι μηνὶ μετὰ δυνάμεων ἱκανῶν πρὸς τὸ καταστεῖλαι τοὺς ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ γενομένων ἐσόμεθα βεβοηθημένοι ὑφʼ ὑμῶν. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους θ Φαρμοῦθι κζ, ἐπιλέγματος ἀναγνωσθέντος τοῦ ὑπομνήματος

P.Bad. 2 16Pathyris89 BC

ποιήσετε συνγεινόμενοι εἰς τοῦτον τόπον ἐν ἀσφαλείαι ὑπάρχοντα συντηρηθῆναι τοῦτον τῶι κυρίωι βασιλεῖ· οὕτω γὰρ πράσσοντες καὶ τὴν πρὸς τὰ πράγματα εὔνοιαν διατηροῦντες … ε … παρὰ τῶν ἐπάνω

“And passing now by the Sea <the> of Galilee He saw Simon and Andrew the brother of him <the> of Simon net-casting a net into the sea; they were for fishermen.”

ἁλιεῖς.halieus fishermen. G231 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A fisherman, like those Jesus called to follow him in Matthew 4:18-19 and Mark 1:16-17. This occupation was common in biblical times, with many people relying on fishing for their livelihood.

Amplified meaning

fishers, those who earn a living by catching fish

Tyndale gloss

fisherman

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἁλιεύς (transliterated as halieus) means 'fisherman' and is derived from the root related to the sea (ἅλς). It appears in the New Testament in contexts referring to Jesus calling his disciples, who were fishermen. The entries consistently define it as someone who works with the sea, covering both fishermen and sailors.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἁλεεύς (Rec. ἁλιεύς, the older form; WH, App., 151, -έως, ὁ

(< ἅλς, the sea),

[in LXX for דָּג, דַּוָּג;]

a fisherman: Mt 4:18, 19, Mk 1:16, 17, Lk 5:2.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἁλιεύς, -έως, ὁ, (GAs, ἁλός, the sea), [fr. Hom. down]; a fisherman, fisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq.; Mk. i. 16 sq.; Lk. vy. 2, —in all which pass. T and WH have ἁλεεῖς fr. the form ἁλεεύς, q. V-

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἁλιεύς. The word is too common in itself to need illustrating, unless we recorded the appearance of the epithet ποτάμιος to indicate a fisherman who exercised his calling on the Nile. It is, however, a good example of the rule by which in Hellenistic of the second period (ἡ e. A.D.) two z-sounds are not allowed to come together: see Pro/eg.* p. 44 f. In this one case, in the nom. and accus. pl. of ἁλιεύς, dissimilation instead of contraction has taken place: aAeets occurs in NT and in P Flor I. 127} (a.p. 256), but note 119? aAt[ets and 275°, from the same correspondence, and BGU IV. 1035° (v/a.D.). Of course P Petr III. 59ii-§ belongs to a period when the phonetic difficulty was not felt. Another expedient was ἁλιέας, P Flor II. 2018 (iii/A.p.). T1ellenistic does not follow the Attic contractions (Awpias, -@v): cf. ἁλιέων BGU III. 756% (aA.p. 199), ᾿Εἰριέως P Petr IIL. 59 (a). We find…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἁλιεύς (halieus) — fisherman.

ἁλι-εύς

(later written ἁλεεύς[LXX+NT], ὁ, genitive έως, Ionic ῆος, and contraction ἁλιῶς[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—one who has to do with the sea, and so,

1. fisher, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. seaman, sailor, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐρέτας ἁλιῆας rowers on the sea, [Refs]; as adjective, ἁλιεὺς στρατός [Refs]

3. a fish, ={βάτραχος}, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἁλιεύς

halieus

from 251; a sailor (as engaged on the salt water), i.e. (by

implication) a fisher:--fisher(-man).

see GREEK for 251

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἁλιεύς, έως, ὁ

n.m.

a fisherman

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἁλιεύς halieus 5x

a fisherman, Mt. 4:18, 19; Mk. 1:16, 17; Lk. 5:2

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἁλιεύς ἅλς one who has to do with the sea, and so,

a fisher, Hom., etc.

a seaman, sailor, Od.; with another Subst., ἐρέτας ἁλιῆας sea-faring rowers, id. Od.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Certain apostles Mt 4:18-21; Mr 1:16,19; Joh 21:2,3

→ FIGURATIVE Jer 16:16; Mt 4:19

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

60%fishermen

fishermen60% · 3×fishers40% · 2×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

predicate60%second object20%subject20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

γάρfor

εἰμίI am, exist

σύ

ποιέωI do, make

γίνομαιI come into being, a

σύ

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle the

ἁλιεύςfishermen.5×

what comes after →

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu

ἀπό

αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἁλιεύς · 5× in the New Testament

Matthew Mark Luke

Across the New Testament3 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

θάλασσαthe sea, lake×γάρfor×ποιέωI do, make×ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the human race×

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC

ZPE 26 (1977), p. 295Arsinoites (?)AD 101–AD 225

Παῆσις μητρὸς Ταννῆτος Πεκῦσις Διοσκόρου Σάλβις Ἀπύγχεως Μεσουῆρις Στεφάνου Μαῦρος Σαλιβουττᾶ … Κολλούθου … ἁλιεύς … Ἁτρῆτος … υιος

O.Eleph.Wagner 48ElephantineAD 184

Ἰούλιος Μέλας ἀπαιτητὴς δερμάτων. διέγραψεν Παχνοῦμις ἁλιεὺς ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ δερμάτων ὑπὲρ κο δραχμὰς δ τριώβολον ἡμιωβέλιον. ἔτους κε Χοιὰκ κγ.

P.Oxy. 45 3244OxyrhynchosAD 228

τὸν ἰχθὺν ἀπὸ ιϛ τοῦ ὄντος μηνὸς Χοιὰκ ἐφʼ ὅσον οἱ τοῦ Μονίμου ἐποικίου ἁλεεῖς ἐργάζονται εἰς τὸ ἐν μηδενὶ μεμφθῆναι ἢ ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ ὅρκῳ. παρέσχον δὲ ἐμαυτοῦ

BSB	As Jesus was walking beside the Sea of Galilee, He saw Simon and his brother Andrew. They were casting a net into the sea, for they were fishermen.
KJV	Now as he walked by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon and Andrew his brother casting a net into the sea: for they were fishers.
ASV	And passing along by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon and Andrew the brother of Simon casting a net in the sea; for they were fishers.
YLT	And, walking by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon, and Andrew his brother, casting a drag into the sea, for they were fishers,
WEB	Passing along by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon and Andrew, the brother of Simon, casting a net into the sea, for they were fishermen.
BBE	And going by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon, and Andrew, the brother of Simon, putting a net into the sea: for they were fishermen.

Mark 1:16 — Word Study

Cite / Share This Page

Deep Study — Mark 1:16

Context — The Calling of the First Disciplesgenerated

Cross References

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 9 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

Nave’s Topical Bible — the subjects this verse is filed under

The Key Word — ἀμφίβληστρον, amphiblēstrongenerated

How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

Sentence Structuregenerated

Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Reflection Questionsgenerated

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Commentators on this verse — 7 expositors, verse by verse

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Modern formal

Tyndale line

Strictly literal

From the Latin

Simplified

Word by word, the decisions they made

The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Word by word, across the editions

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

Lexicons — every word in Mark 1:16

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →